Slide 1

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 2

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 3

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 4

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 5

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 6

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 7

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 8

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 9

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 10

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 11

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 12

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 13

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 14

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 15

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 16

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 17

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 18

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 19

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 20

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 21

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 22

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 23

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 24

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 25

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 26

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 27

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 28

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 29

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 30

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 31

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 32

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 33

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 34

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 35

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 36

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 37

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 38

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 39

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 40

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 41

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 42

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 43

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 44

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 45

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 46

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 47

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 48

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 49

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 50

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 51

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 52

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 53

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 54

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 55

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 56

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 57

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 58

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 59

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 60

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 61

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 62

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 63

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 64

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 65

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 66

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 67

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 68

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 69

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 70

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 71

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 72

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 73

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 74

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 75

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 76

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 77

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 78

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 79

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 80

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 81

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82


Slide 82

ODMS
Operations Data Management Systems
Version 3.0

Features and Application Review

1
03/10/2006

ODMS Version 3.0

Every user will have their own
login.

2

The User Menu includes:
• View Tags (data dictionary)
• Generate Reports
• Link to Create Reports
• User Functions

3

User Menu
• Data Dictionary
• Running Reports

4

The “Data Dictionary” displays a list of all tags
currently configured for collection in ODMS.
Drop down boxes provide filters to find tags by type,
process area and/or parameter.

The table can be sorted by any of the
column headings.

5

Reports
• General

- Useful for quick lookups
• Custom - User defined reports for repeated use
All data is gathered upon request and loaded into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet. The spreadsheet can be saved to the user’s
computer for further analysis.

6

For general reports, create a new tag list or use the
last one to generate the report.

7

Clicking on the one of the “tag list” buttons from the
previous screen opens this window.
This window will hold your list of tags to run a
report on.

“click here” brings up list of tags to
choose from.

8

Use the filters to narrow your tag search.

Select a tag for report by clicking on its
underscored Tag ID.

If less than 50 tags are listed, click the “select all”
button to add all the tags shown to your report list.

9

All tags default to have their data
summarized by average, except tags
with the data type of EVENT, which
defaults to sum.

Change a tag’s summary type or remove it from
the list by clicking on the underscored tag ID.
Make your changes in the Tag Update screen.

10

The order in which the tag columns of data are displayed can be
determined by the user.
Click this resequence button to open the resequence window.

Click on tag ID and use up and down arrows to arrange
display order.
Click this resequence button to save order and
close window.

11

Tag “summarize by” is done.

Sequencing is done.

Close window and run report.

12

2. Select time frame.

1. Select how to see data.

3. Run report.

13

An Excel spreadsheet has been created. The appearance of the
“file download” page will depend on your operating system.

You will be prompted to “Open” or “Save” the Excel file. Make a choice
according to your needs. (This may be operating system dependent.)

14

Resulting Spreadsheet
All data is dumped into a worksheet named “Raw
Data”.

15

Min/Max Reports
• It is now possible to run reports that show only the data above assigned
maximum values and/or below minimum values.
• The min/max values must be assigned to the tag ID through the plant
administrator screen for tag definitions.
• The report shows only the times at which the excursions occurred.
• Other tags showing values such as ‘average’ can be added to the report,
but only the times which match the excursion times will be displayed.
• The reports can only be run with the ‘Summarized By’ option of ‘As
Stored’. Any other choices like ‘Daily’ or ‘Hourly’ will be ignored.

16

A tag ID that has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned in the tag definitions can have a report generated to
display only the values above the max and below the min.

17

If a tag ID has had a valid min value and/or valid max value
assigned, the option to run a min/max report will appear. Selecting
the min/max option will not allow any other options to be selected
for that tag Id.

18

Custom Reports
•Customized reports are user created reports that can be save for future
use.
•Each user’s reports are saved by their User ID. A user can view just his
reports or everyone’s reports.
•The list of tags for a report is created the same way as the list for
general reports.
•Additional administration screens allow the upload of Excel workbooks
that have been edited for the list of tags in the report.

19

The custom reports screen defaults “My”, a list of all report groups created
by the current user for the current plant.
“Standard” reports are those defined by the plant admin as reports
commonly used.

“All Users” are reports created by any user and have been used within the
past 100 days.
“Archive” are reports that haven’t been used in the last 100 days and do not
belong in the “My” or “Standard” groups.

20

The user can select any group from the list to generate a
report.

21

All report data can be opened into the ‘Blank Default Workbook’.
Customized workbooks can be created and used for any report
group. Customized workbooks can also has default “Summarized
By” and “Time Period” options which the user can override.

22

All data for the report group is dumped into a
worksheet named “Raw Data”.

23

All analysis of data can be performed in another
worksheet in this case called “Calculations”.

24

Data from the Raw Data and/or Calculations
worksheets can be formatted into a final report.

25

Tags and Excel workbooks for a report can be
seen by clicking on ‘View’ for the report.
Selecting the ‘All Reports Details’ will open the above
window to all the users’ reports for a plant. The
user’s own reports are listed first.

26

Custom Menu

The Custom Menu is the area where users can create their
own reports and upload Excel workbooks designed to work
with the set of tags selected for the report.

27

Click on the button “Create My Report” to enter the area
to develop a user’s report.

28

The Custom screen defaults to display all the reports created by the
user.
The user can delete a report, add/delete data points, see all details for
their report and add/delete Excel workbooks to use with their report.

29

• Selecting the plant name under the “Reports” heading will bring up all
the reports for the plant.
• The user’s own reports are listed first.
• Plant Administrators can edit all reports for their plant.
• All other users can view report details but can only edit data points or
Excel workbooks for their own reports.

30

Selecting “View” under the “Details” column provides this list
of all data points and Excel files available for a particular
report.

31

Selecting “Edit” under the “Excel Files” column allows the
user to manage the Excel workbooks associated with their
reports.

32

Click on “New Report” to bring up screen to start
entry for a user report.

33

The “Tags for Custom Report” pop-up will appear when the new report is added.
From here the user can add, edit or delete tag points to the report the same way as tags are selected for
general reports.

34

Selecting ‘Edit’ under the ‘Excel Files’ column allows
users the ass/edit/delete Excel files associated with their
custom report. The current report, ‘Treated Effluent”,
has no customized Excel files available. Select ‘Add New
Workbook’ button to name and upload a new Excel file.

35

The user provides a name for the Excel workbook,
then clicks the ‘Browse’ button to locate their Excel
file and upload it to the ODMS server.

36

After selecting the “Browse’ button, the familiar Windows file dialog box
appears. The user can browse to the location of their Excel workbook and
select it. Clicking on the ‘Open’ button retrieves the file for the upload.

37

The ‘File to Load’ field is completed automatically.

Defaults for summarization and timeframe can be set for
an Excel report.

The user clicks the ‘Add’ button to upload the Excel file to the
ODMS server where it is available for all to use.

38

The uploaded Excel workbook, TreatedEffluentSample.xls’, is
now available to use with the custom report group, ‘Treated
Effluent’.

39

User Menu
Data Administration:
•Data Entry
•Review & Approve
•Min/Max Violation

40

Those with administrative rights will also have
menu choices for…
• Data Administration
• Database Administration

41

Data Entry
Entries over multiple days
• Data entry allowed for multiple days for each tag.
• Only one entry per day day is allowed.

Multiple entries per day
• Data entry now allows multiple entries per day.
• Multiple entries are only possible one day at a time.

42

Select ‘New Entry’, then select:
• Number of days
• Date to begin and time
• Entry group
• ‘Choose’ button

43

3 days of data entry have been selected. Some of the days
already have entries. Only one entry per day is allowed with
multiple day selection.

44

For multiple entries in one day, choose 1 day and be certain
to set the data timestamp.

45

After the first data entry for the day, the last timestamp and
data for the day will be displayed and be ready for the next
entry.

46

Data Review and Approval
Data points can be configured for review and approval by
Plant Approve and above users, except for LIMS data.

47

Select the timeframe for data approval. The
available approval groups that need checked will be
shown.

48

Select the check box to approve individual values. Select
‘Approve All’ button at bottom of screen (not seen in this
frame) to approve all current values shown.

Select the ‘Edit’ button to edit individual values. An
audit trail is created for all edited data.

49

Min/Max Violations
Data points can be configured with a “Valid Min” and a “Valid
Max”. Those with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights can
“flag” data outside of the range, to exclude that data from
reports. LIMS data cannot be flagged.

50

Select the ‘Flag’ link to administer min/max
excursions for a data point. Flagged data
remains in the data , but will not be included in
reports.

51

Select the check box to flag individual values.
Select ‘Flag All’ button to flag all current values
shown.

52

Admin Menu
The Admin Menu provides users with Plant Admin rights the
ability to manage the following for their plants …
• individual data points (tags).
• edit all data except LIMS.
• Tag Groups (data entry and approval).

53

Select the ‘Administration’ button from the User
Menu brings the user to the Admin Menu for the
user’s default plant.

54

Tag Definitions

The Tag Definitions screens provide for the creation
and administration of data points (tags).

55

‘Tag Definitions’ brings up the data dictionary screen with option to create new
tags or edit existing ones.
Select the ‘Create New Tag’ button to add a new data point. Select the Tag ID
link to edit an existing tag.

56

This is the tag edit screen for an existing tag. The fields
available will vary with the different tag types. This one is
summarized, which is min, max and average data.

57

This tag edit screen is for a LIMS tag. The ‘last date
collected’ field can be changed so a re-pull of data
from the LIMS database can be done. Click ‘update’
after editing the date, reopen this window, then select
‘Recover LIMS Data’ to start the data copy.

58

Tag Groups

The Tags Groups administration allows for the
creation of a set of tags for use in entry screens
and approval screens.

59

‘Tag Groups’ brings up a list of all tag groups for Approval and Entry for the
current plant. Select ‘Group Type’ from the drop to display the list of only that
group type or to add a new group of that type. Click ‘New Group’ to add a group
or select the ‘Group ID’ to edit an existing group.

60

Typical edit screen for a group.

61

Tags for Groups

Managing tags is the same for all group types.
There is a separate screen for each group type.

62

‘Entry Tags’ shows the screen with the Tag IDs for a selected group. To add
data points to a group, select the ‘click here’ button. To remove a data point,
select the Tag ID.
‘Approval Tags’ works the same as Entry Tags.

63

The data dictionary for tag group choices looks very similar to that used
by reports, except there is no plant filter available.

64

4500 Tags

Data points (tags) can be configured for automatic transfer to the
LIMS for inclusion in the monthly 4500 Report. Data from the ODMS
is sent to the LIMS once per day at approximately 5:00 am. 4500 Tag
Management from the Tags and Groups includes:
•Configuring new tags.
•Editing existing tags.
•Designating data for resubmitted to the LIMS on the next scheduled
transfer.

65

The 4500 Tag screen list all the plant tags currently configured to send data to
the LIMS system for the 4500 report.
Select ‘New Tag Definition’ to add a data point to transfer or select the Tag ID to
edit a current one.

66

This is the edit form for an existing 4500 data point. Change the ‘Last
Transfer Date’ to resubmit data to the LIMS database.

Click the ‘Update’ button to submit date change,
then click the ‘ReSubmit’ button to the send data.

67

Data Editing

Only a user with Plant Admin or ODMS Admin rights
can edit data.
An audit trail record is created for all edits.

68

On ‘Edit & Flag Data’ screen, choose the tag ID
and timeframe of data.

69

The user can edit Min, Max and Average values. Check the ‘Change’ box so edit gets submitted.

When the Flag box is checked, the data ‘Approved’ is set to ‘No’. This stops the data from appearing on reports and if it is
a 4500 data point, stops the transfer to LIMS.
An audit record will be created for each change or flag. A comment area is available for reasons for the changes and stored
with the audit record.
Scroll down to find the ‘Submit Changes’ button is at the bottom of the screen.

70

Insert Missing Records

Allows insertion of missing SCADA time slots due to a problem with
the historians. Manual readings can then be entered under the Edit &
Flag screen. Only ODMS and Plant administrators can insert records
and existing records can not be overwritten.

71

72

Audit Trail

An audit trail is created for all data edits include disapproving
data records. The original record is placed in the audit table along
with who did the edit, what time the edit occurred and a reason for
the needed change if one is given.
Only Plant Admin users and above can view audit records.

73

Audits can be viewed for a given tag ID and timestamp or for all edits within a
given timeframe.

74

Sample of the audit display screen. The current record is displayed as ‘New’.
‘Old’ records are listed below the corresponding new record in beginning with the
latest edit.

75

4500 Data Maintenance

The 4500 Data Maintenance features available from the Data
Menu are unchanged from Version 1. Only Plant Admin users
and above can access 4500 data.

76

Data for the 4500 report can be edited at the ‘Edit &
Flag’ screen or here.

77

Select a tag to edit and the date box shows up for the user to
enter what date to edit data. Click ‘Get Data’ button to bring
up the data.

78

Data can be entered along with a comment on why it was changed. All
changes will have an audit trail.

79

User Configuration
Anyone using the ODMS will need a login account.
User name for login should be the same as their District login.
Users can choose their own password.

80

ODMS ‘User Configuration’ shows all of the users with logins
to the ODMS application. Users with Plant Admin rights can
add and edit user accounts for their plant. ODMS Admin
users can access all users.

81

Most users will start with ‘General’ rights.

82